From e064e2939b34a4cc7326d8f6edbe9878e9295dc3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Chris Davis Date: Thu, 7 Aug 2025 14:16:30 -0700 Subject: [PATCH] Add Exchange Server SE 5 --- .../New-MalwareFilterRule.md | 30 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRole.md | 18 +- .../New-ManagementRoleAssignment.md | 38 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementScope.md | 26 +- .../New-MapiVirtualDirectory.md | 24 +- .../New-MessageClassification.md | 26 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationBatch.md | 82 ++--- .../New-MigrationEndpoint.md | 32 +- .../New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md | 112 +++--- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-MoveRequest.md | 86 ++--- .../New-OabVirtualDirectory.md | 32 +- .../New-OfflineAddressBook.md | 24 +- .../New-OrganizationRelationship.md | 44 +-- .../New-OutlookProtectionRule.md | 26 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProvider.md | 10 +- .../New-OwaMailboxPolicy.md | 10 +- .../New-OwaVirtualDirectory.md | 32 +- .../New-PartnerApplication.md | 26 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-PolicyTipConfig.md | 12 +- .../New-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md | 30 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolder.md | 16 +- .../New-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md | 44 +-- .../New-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md | 36 +- .../New-ReceiveConnector.md | 124 +++---- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteDomain.md | 12 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteMailbox.md | 56 +-- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicy.md | 14 +- .../New-RetentionPolicyTag.md | 34 +- .../New-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md | 16 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleGroup.md | 34 +- .../New-SearchDocumentFormat.md | 18 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-SendConnector.md | 80 ++--- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-SettingOverride.md | 26 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-SharingPolicy.md | 16 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailbox.md | 24 +- .../New-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md | 22 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-SweepRule.md | 32 +- .../New-SyncMailPublicFolder.md | 76 ++-- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-SystemMessage.md | 18 +- .../New-ThrottlingPolicy.md | 246 ++++++------- .../ExchangePowerShell/New-TransportRule.md | 332 +++++++++--------- .../New-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md | 50 +-- .../New-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md | 14 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Redirect-Message.md | 10 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ADPermission.md | 28 +- .../Remove-AcceptedDomain.md | 10 +- .../Remove-ActiveSyncDevice.md | 10 +- .../Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md | 10 +- .../Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceClass.md | 10 +- .../Remove-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md | 12 +- .../Remove-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md | 10 +- .../Remove-AddressBookPolicy.md | 10 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressList.md | 12 +- .../Remove-AddressRewriteEntry.md | 10 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Remove-App.md | 16 +- .../Remove-AttachmentFilterEntry.md | 10 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthRedirect.md | 10 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthServer.md | 10 +- .../Remove-AuthenticationPolicy.md | 8 +- .../Remove-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md | 10 +- .../Remove-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md | 10 +- .../Remove-CalendarEvents.md | 16 +- .../Remove-ClassificationRuleCollection.md | 10 +- .../Remove-ClientAccessRule.md | 10 +- .../Remove-ComplianceSearch.md | 8 +- .../Remove-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md | 8 +- .../Remove-ContentFilterPhrase.md | 12 +- .../Remove-DataClassification.md | 10 +- .../Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md | 10 +- ...Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md | 10 +- .../Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupServer.md | 16 +- .../Remove-DeliveryAgentConnector.md | 10 +- .../Remove-DistributionGroup.md | 14 +- .../Remove-DistributionGroupMember.md | 14 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicy.md | 10 +- .../Remove-DlpPolicyTemplate.md | 10 +- .../Remove-DynamicDistributionGroup.md | 12 +- .../Remove-EcpVirtualDirectory.md | 10 +- .../Remove-EdgeSubscription.md | 12 +- .../Remove-EmailAddressPolicy.md | 10 +- .../Remove-ExchangeCertificate.md | 14 +- .../Remove-FederatedDomain.md | 14 +- .../Remove-FederationTrust.md | 10 +- .../Remove-ForeignConnector.md | 10 +- .../Remove-GlobalAddressList.md | 10 +- .../Remove-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md | 18 +- .../Remove-HybridConfiguration.md | 8 +- .../Remove-IPAllowListEntry.md | 10 +- .../Remove-IPAllowListProvider.md | 10 +- .../Remove-IPBlockListEntry.md | 10 +- .../Remove-IPBlockListProvider.md | 10 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Remove-InboxRule.md | 16 +- .../Remove-IntraOrganizationConnector.md | 10 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Remove-JournalRule.md | 10 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Mailbox.md | 38 +- .../Remove-MailboxDatabase.md | 10 +- .../Remove-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md | 10 +- 97 files changed, 1348 insertions(+), 1348 deletions(-) diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterRule.md index 2b3a5a5742..cdd83af3d6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example creates a new malware filter rule named Contoso Recipients with the ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the malware filter rule. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MalwareFilterPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MalwareFilterPolicy parameter specifies the malware filter policy that's associated with the malware filter rule. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Comments parameter specifies informative comments for the rule, such as what the rule is used for or how it has changed over time. The length of the comment can't exceed 1024 characters. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter enables or disables the malware filter rule. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients with email addresses in the specified domains. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfSentTo parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfSentToMemberOf parameter specifies an exception that looks for messages sent to members of distribution groups, mail-enabled security groups, or sent to Microsoft 365 Groups. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, the value 0 is the highest priority, and rules can't have the same priority value. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientDomainIs parameter specifies a condition that looks for recipients with email addresses in the specified domains. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SentTo parameter specifies a condition that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SentToMemberOf parameter specifies a condition that looks for messages sent to members of distribution groups, mail-enabled security groups, or sent to Microsoft 365 Groups. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRole.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRole.md index fa552a0a5e..8384bfbed8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRole.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRole.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example creates the unscoped management role In-ho ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the role. The maximum length of the name is 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Parent parameter specifies the identity of the role to copy. If the name of the role contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you specify the Parent parameter, you can't use the UnScopedTopLevel switch. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnScopedTopLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Description parameter specifies the description that's displayed when the management role is viewed using the Get-ManagementRole cmdlet. Enclose the description in quotation marks ("). @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnabledCmdlets parameter specifies the cmdlets that are copied from the parent role. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRoleAssignment.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRoleAssignment.md index 1e4c1d0ef6..6ba6506e29 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRoleAssignment.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRoleAssignment.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ This example assigns the Mail Recipients role to the Contoso Sub - Seattle role ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a name for the new management role assignment. The maximum length of the name is 64 characters. If the management role assignment name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you don't specify a name, a name is created automatically. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Computer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Policy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Policy parameter specifies the name of the management role assignment policy to assign the management role to. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Role parameter specifies the existing role to assign. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the role. For example: @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecurityGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SecurityGroup parameter specifies the name of the management role group or mail-enabled universal security group to assign the management role to. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The User parameter specifies the user to assign the management role to. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the existing recipient-based management scope to associate with this management role assignment. If the management scope name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you use the CustomRecipientWriteScope parameter, you can't use the RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope or ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameters. @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Delegating -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Delegating switch specifies whether the user or USG assigned to the role can delegate the role to other users or groups. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the exclusive recipient-based management scope to associate with the new role assignment. If you use the ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameter, you can't use the CustomRecipientWriteScope or RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameters. If the scope name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAdministrativeUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameter specifies the OU to scope the new role assignment to. If you use the RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameter, you can't use the CustomRecipientWriteScope or ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameters. To specify an OU, use the syntax: domain/ou. If the OU name contains spaces, enclose the domain and OU in quotation marks ("). @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRelativeWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRelativeWriteScope parameter specifies the type of restriction to apply to a recipient scope. The available types are None, Organization, MyGAL, Self, and MyDistributionGroups. The RecipientRelativeWriteScope parameter is automatically set when the CustomRecipientWriteScope or RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameters are used. @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnScopedTopLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementScope.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementScope.md index 7689690822..3fea608e67 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementScope.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementScope.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ This example creates the Seattle Databases scope and sets a database restriction ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the management scope. The name can be up to 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRestrictionFilter parameter uses OPATH filter syntax to specify the recipients that are included in the scope. The syntax is `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Exclusive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Exclusive switch specifies that the role should be an exclusive scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRoot parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) under which the filter specified with the RecipientRestrictionFilter parameter should be applied. Valid input for this parameter is an OU or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MapiVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MapiVirtualDirectory.md index 2e66284d4f..63de2bf232 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MapiVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MapiVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example creates a new MAPI virtual directory that has the following configu ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IISAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IISAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication methods that are enabled on the virtual directory in Internet Information Services (IIS). Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MessageClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MessageClassification.md index bf7fa10717..552bd2da44 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MessageClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MessageClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example creates a locale-specific (Spanish - Spain ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the message classification. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the title of the message classification that's displayed in Outlook and selected by users. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional on in on-premises Exchange. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderDescription -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SenderDescription parameter specifies the detailed text that's shown to Outlook senders when they select a message classification to apply to a message before they send the message. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClassificationID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ClassificationID parameter specifies the classification ID (GUID) of an existing message classification that you want to import and use in your Exchange organization. Use this parameter if you're configuring message classifications that span two Exchange forests in the same organization. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayPrecedence -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayPrecedence parameter specifies the relative precedence of the message classification to other message classifications that might be applied to a specified message. Valid values are: @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PermissionMenuVisible -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PermissionMenuVisible parameter specifies whether the values that you entered for the DisplayName and RecipientDescription parameters are displayed in Outlook as the user composes a message. Valid values are: @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDescription -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientDescription parameter specifies the detailed text that's shown to Outlook recipient when they receive a message that has the message classification applied. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainClassificationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetainClassificationEnabled parameter specifies whether the message classification should persist with the message if the message is forwarded or replied to. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationBatch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationBatch.md index e928c46162..c7ee0db4cd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationBatch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationBatch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ A Google Workspace migration batch is created that uses the CSV migration file g ### -UserIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserIds parameter specifies the users that you want to copy from an existing migration batch (for example, if a previous migration was partially successful). You identify a user by email address or by their Guid property value from the Get-MigrationUser cmdlet. You can specify multiple users separated by commas. @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Users -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Users parameter specifies the users that you want to copy from an existing migration batch (for example, if a previous migration was partially successful). You identify the users by using the Get-MigrationUser cmdlet. For example: @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies an unique name for the migration batch on each system (Exchange On-premises or Exchange Online). The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CSVData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CSVData parameter specifies the CSV file that contains information about the user mailboxes to be moved or migrated. The required attributes in the header row of the CSV file vary depending on the type of migration. For more information, see [CSV files for mailbox migration](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/csv-files-for-mailbox-migration-exchange-2013-help). @@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Local -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -735,7 +735,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourcePublicFolderDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -779,7 +779,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIncrementalSyncs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnknownColumnsInCsv -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnknownColumnsInCsv parameter specifies whether to allow extra columns in the CSV file that aren't used by migration. Valid values are: @@ -843,7 +843,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ArchiveOnly switch specifies that only archive mailboxes are migrated for the users in the migration batch (primary mailboxes aren't migrated). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -865,7 +865,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoComplete switch forces the finalization of the individual mailboxes as soon as the mailbox has completed initial synchronization. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoRetryCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -927,7 +927,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoStart -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoStart switch immediately starts the processing of the new migration batch. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -967,7 +967,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the migration request is ready to complete. @@ -989,7 +989,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompleteAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableOnCopy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisableOnCopy switch disables the original migration job item for a user if you're copying users from an existing batch to a new batch by using the UserIds or Users parameters. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1123,7 +1123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisallowExistingUsers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1145,7 +1145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1339,7 +1339,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -1366,7 +1366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1408,7 +1408,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveOptions parameter specifies the stages of the migration that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotificationEmails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NotificationEmails parameter specifies one or more email addresses that migration status reports are sent to. Specify the value as a string array, and separate multiple email addresses with commas. @@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimaryOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrimaryOnly switch specifies that only primary mailboxes are migrated for the users in the migration batch that also have archive mailboxes (archive mailboxes aren't migrated). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderToUnifiedGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReportInterval parameter specifies how frequently emailed reports should be sent to the email addresses listed within NotificationEmails. @@ -1712,7 +1712,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies the stages of the migration that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -1730,7 +1730,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoving -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is replaced by the MoveOptions parameter. @@ -1770,7 +1770,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipReports -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipReports switch specifies that you want to skip automatic reporting for the migration. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipSteps -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1833,7 +1833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceEndpoint parameter specifies the migration endpoint to use for the source of the migration batch. You create the migration endpoint by using the New-MigrationEndpoint cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the migration endpoint. For example: @@ -1876,7 +1876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartAfter parameter specifies a delay before the data migration for the users within the batch is started. The migration is prepared, but the actual data migration for the user doesn't start until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -1901,7 +1901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetArchiveDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetArchiveDatabases parameter specifies the database where the archive mailboxes specified in the migration batch are migrated to. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -1929,7 +1929,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetDatabases parameter specifies the identity of the database that you're moving mailboxes to. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -1959,7 +1959,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDeliveryDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetDeliveryDomain parameter specifies the FQDN of the external email address created in the source forest for the mail-enabled user when the migration batch is complete. @@ -1979,7 +1979,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetEndpoint parameter specifies the migration endpoint to use for the destination of the migration batch. You create the migration endpoint by using the New-MigrationEndpoint cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the migration endpoint. For example: @@ -2002,7 +2002,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeZone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TimeZone parameter specifies the time zone of the administrator who submits the migration batch. @@ -2030,7 +2030,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -2048,7 +2048,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkflowControlFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkflowControlFlags parameter specifies advanced controls for the steps that are performed in the migration. Valid values are: @@ -2072,7 +2072,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkflowTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkflowTemplate parameter specifies advanced controls for the steps that are performed in the migration. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -2090,7 +2090,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationEndpoint.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationEndpoint.md index 137f345d59..d71d215217 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationEndpoint.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationEndpoint.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ This example creates an IMAP migration endpoint that supports 50 concurrent migr ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name you give to the new migration endpoint. You can use the Name parameter when you run the New-MigrationBatch cmdlet. @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Autodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online For an Exchange migration, the Autodiscover switch specifies whether to get other connection settings for the on-premises server from the Autodiscover service. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Compliance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Compliance switch specifies that the endpoint type is compliance. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credentials parameter specifies the credentials to connect to the source or target endpoint for all Exchange migration types. @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddress parameter specifies the email address used by the Autodiscover service or in some cases used to validate the endpoint when you specify the connection settings manually. @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeRemoteMove -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExchangeRemoteMove switch specifies the type of endpoint for cross-forest moves and remote move migrations in a hybrid deployment. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PSTImport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderToUnifiedGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolderToUnifiedGroup switch specifies that the endpoint type is public folders to Microsoft 365 Groups. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteServer parameter specifies the FQDN of the remote server, which depends on the protocol type for moves: @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -824,7 +824,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentIncrementalSyncs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxConcurrentIncrementalSyncs parameter specifies the maximum number of incremental syncs allowed per endpoint. The default value is 20. @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMigrations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxConcurrentMigrations parameter specifies the maximum number of mailboxes that are migrated during initial sync. This parameter is applicable for all migration types. The default value is 100. @@ -980,7 +980,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipVerification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipVerification switch specifies whether to skip verifying that the remote server is reachable when creating a migration endpoint. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md index 8d609417e7..863ff11d57 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ This example creates the mobile device mailbox policy Contoso Policy that has se ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the mobile device mailbox policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBluetooth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBluetooth parameter specifies whether the Bluetooth capabilities are allowed on the mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBrowser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBrowser parameter specifies whether Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer is allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't affect non-Microsoft browsers. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCamera -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowCamera parameter specifies whether the mobile device's camera is allowed. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConsumerEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConsumerEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a personal email account on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access to email accounts using non-Microsoft mobile device email programs. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowDesktopSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowDesktopSync parameter specifies whether the mobile device can synchronize with a desktop computer through a cable. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowExternalDeviceManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowExternalDeviceManagement parameter specifies whether an external device management program is allowed to manage the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowHTMLEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowHTMLEmail parameter specifies whether HTML-formatted email is enabled on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. If set to $false, all email is converted to plain text before synchronization occurs. @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowInternetSharing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowInternetSharing parameter specifies whether the mobile device can be used as a modem to connect a computer to the Internet. This process is also known as tethering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIrDA -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowIrDA parameter specifies whether infrared connections are allowed to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowMobileOTAUpdate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowMobileOTAUpdate parameter specifies whether the policy can be sent to the mobile device over a cellular data connection. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNonProvisionableDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter specifies whether all mobile devices can synchronize with Exchange. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowPOPIMAPEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowPOPIMAPEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a POP3 or IMAP4 email account on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access by non-Microsoft email programs. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRemoteDesktop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRemoteDesktop parameter specifies whether the mobile device can initiate a remote desktop connection. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSimplePassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSimplePassword parameter specifies whether a simple password is allowed on the mobile device. A simple password is a password that has a specific pattern, such as 1111 or 1234. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation parameter specifies whether the messaging application on the mobile device can negotiate the encryption algorithm if a recipient's certificate doesn't support the specified encryption algorithm. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMESoftCerts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMESoftCerts parameter specifies whether S/MIME software certificates are allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowStorageCard -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowStorageCard parameter specifies whether the mobile device can access information stored on a storage card. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowTextMessaging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowTextMessaging parameter specifies whether text messaging is allowed from the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedApplications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedApplications parameter specifies whether unsigned applications can be installed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages parameter specifies whether unsigned installation packages are allowed to run on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowWiFi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowWiFi parameter specifies whether wireless Internet access is allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlphanumericPasswordRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlphanumericPasswordRequired parameter specifies whether the password for the mobile device must be alphanumeric. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApprovedApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApprovedApplicationList parameter specifies a configured list of approved applications for the device. @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether attachments can be downloaded on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This setting is supported by Outlook for iOS and Android. @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePolicyRefreshInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePolicyRefreshInterval parameter specifies how often the policy is sent to the mobile device. @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IrmEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) is enabled for the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default mobile device mailbox policy. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value for the built-in mobile device mailbox policy named Default is $true. The default value for new mobile device mailbox policies that you create is $false. @@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAttachmentSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxAttachmentSize parameter specifies the maximum size of attachments that can be downloaded to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is a size value between 0 and 2147482624 bytes (approximately 2 GB), or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCalendarAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxCalendarAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum range of calendar days that can be synchronized to the mobile device. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -828,7 +828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum number of days of email items to synchronize to the mobile device. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 0 and 2147483647 (Int32) or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -875,7 +875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which HTML-formatted email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 0 and 2147483647 (Int32) or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -895,7 +895,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInactivityTimeLock -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxInactivityTimeLock parameter specifies the length of time that the mobile device can be inactive before the password is required to reactivate it. Valid values are: @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxPasswordFailedAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxPasswordFailedAttempts parameter specifies the number of attempts a user can make to enter the correct password for the mobile device. @@ -936,7 +936,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinPasswordComplexCharacters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinPasswordComplexCharacters parameter specifies the character sets that are required in the password of the mobile device. The character sets are: @@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinPasswordLength -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This setting is supported by Outlook for Android. @@ -992,7 +992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordEnabled parameter specifies whether a password is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordExpiration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordExpiration parameter specifies how long a password can be used on a mobile device before the user is forced to change the password. Valid values are: @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordHistory parameter specifies the number of unique new passwords that need to be created on the mobile device before an old password can be reused. @@ -1053,7 +1053,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether the recovery password for the mobile device is stored in Exchange. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1073,7 +1073,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireDeviceEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireDeviceEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile device must send encrypted S/MIME messages. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1109,7 +1109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that's required to encrypt S/MIME messages on a mobile device. The valid values for this parameter are: @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming parameter specifies whether the mobile device must synchronize manually while roaming. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1153,7 +1153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that's used to sign S/MIME messages on the mobile device. @@ -1173,7 +1173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile device must send signed S/MIME messages. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1191,7 +1191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireStorageCardEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter specifies whether storage card encryption is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1211,7 +1211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnapprovedInROMApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UnapprovedInROMApplicationList parameter specifies a list of applications that can't be run in ROM on the mobile device. @@ -1229,7 +1229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UNCAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows file shares is enabled from the mobile device. In on-premises Exchange organizations, access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -1247,7 +1247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1265,7 +1265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WSSAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services is enabled from the mobile device. In on-premises Exchange organizations, access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MoveRequest.md index f6067d134f..82a5bb8174 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ This example creates a batch move request for all mailboxes on the database DB01 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use the following values: @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Outbound -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Outbound switch specifies that this mailbox move is a cross-forest move and is being initiated from the source forest. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Remote -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Remote switch specifies that the move is outside of your organization and is being initiated from the target forest. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteCredential parameter specifies the username and password of an administrator who has permission to perform the mailbox move. @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteGlobalCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteGlobalCatalog parameter specifies the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the global catalog server for the remote forest. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteHostName parameter specifies the FQDN of the cross-forest organization from which you're moving the mailbox. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteLegacy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDeliveryDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetDeliveryDomain parameter specifies the FQDN of the external email address created in the source forest for the mail-enabled user when the move request is complete. This parameter is allowed only when performing remote moves with the Remote, RemoteLegacy, or Outbound parameter. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowLargeItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ArchiveDomain parameter specifies the FQDN of the external domain to which you're moving the archive. This parameter is used for moving the archive to a cloud-based service. @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ArchiveOnly switch specifies that you're moving only the personal archive associated with the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveTargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for moving a batch of mailboxes. You can then use the name in the BatchName parameter as a search string when you use the Get-MoveRequest cmdlet. @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompleteAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompleteAfter parameter specifies a delay before the request is completed. The request is started, but not completed until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request are kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DoNotPreserveMailboxSignature -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceOffline -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForceOffline switch forces the mailbox move to be performed in offline mode. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForcePull -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForcePush -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -787,7 +787,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncrementalSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncrementalSyncInterval parameter specifies the wait time between incremental syncs. Use this parameter with the CompleteAfter parameter to create a move request that does periodic incremental syncs after the initial sync is complete. @@ -809,7 +809,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveOptions parameter specifies the stages of the move that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreventCompletion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreventCompletion switch specifies whether to run the move request, but not allow it to complete. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimaryOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrimaryOnly switch specifies that the command should only move the primary mailbox (the personal archive isn't moved). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -940,7 +940,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -969,7 +969,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Protect -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1020,7 +1020,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteArchiveTargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteArchiveTargetDatabase parameter specifies the name of the target database in the remote forest to which you're moving the personal archive. Use this parameter when moving users with archives from the local forest to a remote forest. For moves from a remote forest to the local forest, use the ArchiveTargetDatabase parameter. @@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteTargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteTargetDatabase parameter specifies the name of the target database in the remote forest. Use this parameter when moving mailboxes from the local forest to a remote forest. For moves from a remote forest to the local forest, use the TargetDatabase parameter. @@ -1078,7 +1078,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoving -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is replaced by the MoveOptions parameter. @@ -1143,7 +1143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartAfter parameter specifies a delay before the request is started. The request isn't started until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -1170,7 +1170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1190,7 +1190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -1208,7 +1208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendWhenReadyToComplete switch specifies whether to suspend the move request before it reaches the status of CompletionInProgress. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1254,7 +1254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OabVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OabVirtualDirectory.md index e521394787..33a5604517 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OabVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OabVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example creates an OAB virtual directory on CASServer01 and configures the ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter specifies the file system path of the virtual directory. We recommend using this parameter only when you need to use a custom location for the virtual directory files. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates the default location is used. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PollInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PollInterval parameter specifies the time interval in minutes that the distribution service polls the offline address book generation server for updates. The default value is 480 minutes (8 hours). @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recovery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSSL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireSSL parameter specifies whether the client connection to the virtual directory requires Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption. Valid values are: @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OfflineAddressBook.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OfflineAddressBook.md index 02ba871661..b2ca657dd6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OfflineAddressBook.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OfflineAddressBook.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ If you configure OABs to use public folder distribution, but your organization d ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the OAB. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressLists -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressLists parameter specifies the address lists or global address lists that are included in the OAB. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiffRetentionPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DiffRetentionPeriod parameter specifies the number of days that the OAB difference files are stored on the server. Valid values are integers from 7 to 1825, or the value unlimited. The default value is 30. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GeneratingMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalWebDistributionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether the OAB is used by all mailboxes and mailbox databases that don't have an OAB specified. Valid values are: @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowMailboxDistributionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -VirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OrganizationRelationship.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OrganizationRelationship.md index 976f4da310..2bacdcf096 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OrganizationRelationship.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OrganizationRelationship.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The requesting organization only receives free/busy information with the time. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the organization relationship. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainNames -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DomainNames parameter specifies the SMTP domains of the external organization. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas (for example, "contoso.com","northamerica.contoso.com"), limited to 238 domains in one request. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ArchiveAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship is configured to provide remote archive access. Valid values are: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryReportEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DeliveryReportEnabled parameter specifies whether Delivery Reports should be shared over the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship should be used to retrieve free/busy information from the external organization. Valid values are: @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessLevel parameter specifies the maximum amount of detail returned to the requesting organization. Valid values are: @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessScope parameter specifies an internal mail-enabled security group where member free/busy information is accessible by the external organization. For best performance, the group should have less than 10,000 members. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxMoveEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailboxMoveEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship enables moving mailboxes to or from the external organization. Valid values are: @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips for users in this organization are returned over this organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessLevel parameter specifies the level of MailTips data that's externally shared over this organization relationship. This parameter can have the following values: @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessScope parameter specifies a mail-enabled security group in the internal organization that contains users whose free/busy information is accessible by an external organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationContact -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationContact parameter specifies the email address that can be used to contact the external organization (for example, administrator@fourthcoffee.com). @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhotosEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhotosEnabled parameter specifies whether photos for users in the internal organization are returned over the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetApplicationUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetApplicationUri parameter specifies the target Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of the external organization. The TargetApplicationUri parameter is specified by Exchange when requesting a delegated token for the external organization to fetch free and busy information, for example, mail.contoso.com. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetAutodiscoverEpr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetAutodiscoverEpr parameter specifies the Autodiscover URL of Exchange Web Services for the external organization, for example, `https://contoso.com/autodiscover/autodiscover.svc/wssecurity`. Exchange uses the Autodiscover service to automatically detect the correct Exchange server endpoint to use for external requests. @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetOwaURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetOwaURL parameter specifies the Outlook on the web (formerly Outlook Web App) URL of the external organization defined in the organization relationship. It's used for Outlook on the web redirection in a cross-premise Exchange scenario. Configuring this attribute enables users in the organization to use their current Outlook on the web URL to access Outlook on the web in the external organization. @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetSharingEpr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetSharingEpr parameter specifies the URL of the target Exchange Web Services for the external organization. @@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProtectionRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProtectionRule.md index 05485cdd9b..a315c1af86 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProtectionRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProtectionRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example applies the AD RMS template named Template-Contoso to messages sent ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the rule. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate parameter specifies the AD RMS template to apply to the message. An AD RMS template can be specified using the template name. Use the Get-RMSTemplate cmdlet to retrieve templates from your AD RMS server. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the Outlook protection rules are enabled. New Outlook protection rules are enabled by default. To create a rule without enabling it, set the Enabled parameter to $false. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromDepartment parameter specifies the sender's department as a condition. The user's department property is compared with the value specified. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies whether to set the order of processing of Outlook protection rules. Rules with a lower priority value are executed first. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentTo parameter specifies one or more recipients as a rule condition. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the internal recipient. For example: @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentToScope parameter specifies the message scope as a condition. You can use one of the following values: @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserCanOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserCanOverride parameter specifies whether users can override actions taken by Outlook protection rules. By default, users can override actions taken by Outlook protection rules. When set to $false, the UserCanOverride parameter prevents the user from overriding the rule when sending the message. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProvider.md index 9e7a811556..c3553a8334 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example creates the AutoDiscoverConfig object Autodiscover1 and the specifi ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter provides the common name of the AutoDiscoverConfig object. This can be a user-friendly name for identification. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaMailboxPolicy.md index c0311a932d..af02008a4c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example creates the Outlook on the web mailbox policy named Corporate. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the new policy. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaVirtualDirectory.md index e051fb1584..e8751f9b9f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationRoot parameter specifies the metabase path of the virtual directory. By default, this path is the same as the website in which the virtual directory is created. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter specifies the IIS application pool in which the virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAuthenticationMethods parameter restricts the authentication methods that can be used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. Valid values are: @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. This setting is important when Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is used. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. This setting is important when SSL is used. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter specifies the file system path of the virtual directory. We recommend using this parameter only when you need to use a custom location for the virtual directory files. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates the default location is used. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PartnerApplication.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PartnerApplication.md index af5db2924b..272bdff3c4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PartnerApplication.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PartnerApplication.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example creates a new HRApp partner application named HRApp. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the partner application. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplicationIdentifier parameter specifies a unique application identifier for the partner application that uses an authorization server. When specifying a value for the ApplicationIdentifier parameter, you must also use the UseAuthServer parameter. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptSecurityIdentifierInformation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptSecurityIdentifierInformation parameter specifies whether Exchange should accept security identifiers (SIDs) from another trusted Active Directory forest for the partner application. By default, new partner applications are configured to not accept SIDs from another forest. If you're in deployment with a trusted forest, set the parameter to $true. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccountType parameter specifies the type of Microsoft account that's required for the partner application. Valid values are: @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the partner application is enabled. By default, new partner applications are enabled. Set the parameter to $false to create the application configuration in a disabled state. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LinkedAccount parameter specifies a linked Active Directory user account for the application. Exchange evaluates Role Based Access Control (RBAC) permissions for the linked account when authorizing a token used to perform a task. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Realm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustAnySSLCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PolicyTipConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PolicyTipConfig.md index 0eb6102ca0..8fbaed382c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PolicyTipConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PolicyTipConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example sets the informational URL in Policy Tips to the value `https://www ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the custom Policy Tip you want to modify. Valid input for this parameter is one of the following values: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Value -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Value parameter specifies the text that's displayed by the Policy Tip. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md index b79b93eb6b..e81c361881 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example creates a Windows PowerShell virtual directory and configures it to ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the new PowerShell virtual directory. The name you provide has the name of the website it's created under appended to it. If the name you provide contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the PowerShell virtual directory. The valid values are $true and $false. The default value is $true. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalUrl parameter specifies the external URL that the PowerShell virtual directory points to. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalUrl parameter specifies the internal URL that the PowerShell virtual directory points to. @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSSL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireSSL parameter specifies whether the PowerShell virtual directory should require that the client connection be made using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). The valid values are $true and $false. The default value is $true. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the PowerShell virtual directory. The valid values are $true and $false. The default value is $true. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolder.md index 77226a0eca..736e45e5a7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example creates the public folder Support in the North\_America hierarchy p ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name for the public folder. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EformsLocaleId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EformsLocaleId parameter specifies the locale-specific version of the e-forms library. The valid input for the EformsLocaleId parameter is the string names listed in the Culture Name column in the Microsoft .NET Class Library class reference available at [CultureInfo Class](https://learn.microsoft.com/dotnet/api/system.globalization.cultureinfo). @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the hierarchy public folder mailbox where you want this public folder created. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Path parameter specifies the location of the folder in the folder hierarchy, for example, \\Legal\\Cases. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md index e096e2cdf4..9aaa4ac222 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ This example creates a public folder migration request from the Exchange 2010 so ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the public folder migration request. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceDatabase parameter specifies the target database for the public folders. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for the public folder migration batch. You can use the BatchName parameter as a search string when you use the Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequest cmdlet. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CSVData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CSVData parameter specifies the mapping file output generated by the PublicFoldertoMailboxMapGenerator.ps1 script. Use this parameter for local migrations. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CSVStream -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CSVStream parameter specifies the mapping file output generated by the PublicFoldertoMailboxMapGenerator.ps1 script. Use this parameter for remote migrations. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMerging parameter specifies whether certain stages of a public folder migration are skipped for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless directed to do so by a Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md index 94bd9c8323..49ddc0d274 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ This example moves all public folders from public folder mailbox Pub1 to public ### -Folders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Folders parameter specifies the public folders that you want to move. If the public folder has child public folders, these child public folders aren't moved unless you explicitly state them in the command. You can move multiple public folders by separating them with a comma, for example, \\Dev\\CustomerEngagements,\\Dev\\RequestsforChange,\\Dev\\Usability. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the target public folder mailbox that you want to move the public folders to. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies that the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowLargeItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowLargeItems switch specifies that you can move large items only when they're encountered. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to be completed. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after completion before being automatically removed. The default value for this parameter is 30 days. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the public folder move request. If you don't specify a name, the default name is PublicFolderMove. @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkloadType parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ReceiveConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ReceiveConnector.md index 99f534f8f4..62c23c91b2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ReceiveConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ReceiveConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ It accepts incoming SMTP connections only from the IP range 192.168.0.1-192.168. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the Receive connector. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Bindings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Bindings parameter specifies the local IP address and TCP port number that's used by the Receive connector. This parameter uses the syntax `"IPv4Address:TCPPort","IPv6Address:TCPPort"`. You can specify an IPv4 address and port, an IPv6 address and port, or both. The IP address values 0.0.0.0 or `[::]` indicate that the Receive connector uses all available local IPv4 or all IPv6 addresses. @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Client -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Client switch specifies the Client usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internal -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internal switch specifies the Internal usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internet switch specifies the Internet usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Partner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Partner switch specifies the Partner usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteIPRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteIPRanges parameter specifies the remote IP addresses that the Receive connector accepts messages from. Valid values are: @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Usage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Usage parameter specifies the default permission groups and authentication methods that are assigned to the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdvertiseClientSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdvertiseClientSettings parameter specifies whether the SMTP server name, port number, and authentication settings for the Receive connector are displayed to users in the options of Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMechanism -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthMechanism parameter specifies the advertised and accepted authentication mechanisms for the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthTarpitInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthTarpitInterval parameter specifies the period of time to delay responses to failed authentication attempts from remote servers that might be abusing the connection. The default value is 5 seconds. @@ -726,7 +726,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Banner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Banner parameter specifies a custom SMTP 220 banner that's displayed to remote messaging servers that connect to the Receive connector. When you specify a value, enclose the value in quotation marks, and start the value with 220 (the default "Service ready" SMTP response code). @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BinaryMimeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BinaryMimeEnabled parameter specifies whether the BINARYMIME Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ChunkingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ChunkingEnabled parameter specifies whether the CHUNKING Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -794,7 +794,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionInactivityTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectionInactivityTimeout parameter specifies the maximum amount of idle time before a connection to the Receive connector is closed. @@ -859,7 +859,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the maximum time that the connection to the Receive connector can remain open, even if the connection is actively transmitting data. @@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Custom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Custom switch specifies the Custom usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultDomain parameter specifies the default accepted domain to use for the Exchange organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the accepted domain. For example: @@ -942,7 +942,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryStatusNotificationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeliveryStatusNotificationEnabled parameter specifies whether the DSN (delivery status notification) Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -965,7 +965,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainSecureEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainSecureEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable mutual Transport Layer Security (TLS) authentication (also known as Domain Secure) for the domains that are serviced by the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EightBitMimeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EightBitMimeEnabled parameter specifies whether the 8BITMIME Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableAuthGSSAPI -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableAuthGSSAPI parameter enables or disables Kerberos when Integrated Windows authentication is available on the Receive connector (the AuthMechanism parameter contains the value Integrated). Valid values are: @@ -1060,7 +1060,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnhancedStatusCodesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnhancedStatusCodesEnabled parameter specifies whether the ENHANCEDSTATUSCODES Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1104,7 +1104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionPolicy parameter specifies how Extended Protection for Authentication is implemented on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1128,7 +1128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fqdn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Fqdn parameter specifies the destination FQDN that's shown to connected messaging servers. This value is used in the following locations: @@ -1153,7 +1153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LongAddressesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LongAddressesEnabled parameter specifies whether the Receive connector accepts long X.400 email addresses. The X.400 email addresses are encapsulated in SMTP email addresses by using the Internet Mail Connector Encapsulated Address (IMCEA) encapsulation method. Valid values are @@ -1182,7 +1182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAcknowledgementDelay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter isn't used by Exchange Server 2016. It's used only by Exchange 2010 servers in coexistence environments. @@ -1206,7 +1206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxHeaderSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxHeaderSize parameter specifies the maximum size of the SMTP message header before the Receive connector closes the connection. The default value is 256 kilobytes (262144 bytes). @@ -1235,7 +1235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxHopCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxHopCount parameter specifies the maximum number of hops that a message can take before the message is rejected by the Receive connector. The maximum number of hops is determined by the number of Received header fields that exist in a submitted message. @@ -1255,7 +1255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInboundConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxInboundConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of inbound connections that this Receive connector serves at the same time. @@ -1277,7 +1277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInboundConnectionPercentagePerSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxInboundConnectionPercentagePerSource parameter specifies the maximum number of connections that a Receive connector serves at the same time from a single IP address, expressed as the percentage of available remaining connections on a Receive connector. @@ -1297,7 +1297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInboundConnectionPerSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxInboundConnectionPerSource parameter specifies the maximum number of connections that this Receive connector serves at the same time from a single IP address. @@ -1319,7 +1319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxLocalHopCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxLocalHopCount parameter specifies the maximum number of local hops that a message can take before the message is rejected by the Receive connector. The maximum number of local hops is determined by the number of Received headers with local server addresses in a submitted message. @@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxLogonFailures -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxLogonFailures parameter specifies the number of logon failures that the Receive connector retries before it closes the connection. @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that's allowed through the Receive connector. The default value is 36 MB, which results in a realistic maximum message size of 25 MB. @@ -1394,7 +1394,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxProtocolErrors -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxProtocolErrors parameter specifies the maximum number of SMTP protocol errors that the Receive connector accepts before closing the connection. @@ -1416,7 +1416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxRecipientsPerMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxRecipientsPerMessage parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients per message that the Receive connector accepts before closing the connection. @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRateLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRateLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of messages that can be sent by a single client IP address per minute. @@ -1460,7 +1460,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRateSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRateSource parameter specifies how the message submission rate is calculated. Valid values are: @@ -1483,7 +1483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrarEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrarEnabled parameter enables or disables Originator Requested Alternate Recipient (ORAR) on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1506,7 +1506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PermissionGroups -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PermissionGroups parameter specifies the well-known security principals who are authorized to use the Receive connector, and the permissions that are assigned to them. Valid values are: @@ -1538,7 +1538,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipeliningEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipeliningEnabled parameter specifies whether the PIPELINING Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1561,7 +1561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProtocolLoggingLevel parameter specifies whether to enable or disable protocol logging for the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1584,7 +1584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectReservedSecondLevelRecipientDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectReservedSecondLevelRecipientDomains parameter specifies whether to reject connections that contain recipients in reserved second-level domains as specified in RFC 2606 (example.com, example.net, or example.org). Valid value are: @@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectReservedTopLevelRecipientDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectReservedTopLevelRecipientDomains parameter specifies whether to reject connections that contain recipients in reserved top-level domains (TLDs) as specified in RFC 2606 (.test, .example, .invalid, or .localhost). Valid value are: @@ -1626,7 +1626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectSingleLabelRecipientDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectSingleLabelRecipientDomains parameter specifies whether to reject connections that contain recipients in single-label domains (for example, chris@contoso instead of chris@contoso.com). Valid values are: @@ -1647,7 +1647,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEHLODomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireEHLODomain parameter specifies whether the client must provide a domain name in the EHLO handshake after the SMTP connection is established. Valid values are: @@ -1668,7 +1668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireTLS -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireTLS parameter specifies whether to require TLS transmission for inbound messages on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1689,7 +1689,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -1714,7 +1714,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServiceDiscoveryFqdn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ServiceDiscoveryFqdn parameter specifies the service discovery fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) for the Receive connector. @@ -1732,7 +1732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SizeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SizeEnabled parameter specifies how the SIZE Extended SMTP extension is used on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1756,7 +1756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuppressXAnonymousTls -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuppressXAnonymousTls parameter specifies whether the X-ANONYMOUSTLS Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1779,7 +1779,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TarpitInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TarpitInterval parameter specifies the amount of time to delay an SMTP response to a remote server that might be abusing the connection. The default value is 00:00:05 (5 seconds). @@ -1803,7 +1803,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. A valid value for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`. The X.500Issuer value is found in the certificate's Issuer field, and the X.500Subject value is found in the certificate's Subject field. You can find these values by running the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet. Or, after you run Get-ExchangeCertificate to find the thumbprint value of the certificate, run the command `$TLSCert = Get-ExchangeCertificate -Thumbprint `, run the command `$TLSCertName = "$($TLSCert.Issuer)$($TLSCert.Subject)"`, and then use the value $TLSCertName for this parameter. @@ -1821,7 +1821,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsDomainCapabilities -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsDomainCapabilities parameter specifies the capabilities that the Receive connector makes available to specific hosts outside of the organization. Remote hosts are authenticated with TLS with certificate validation before these capabilities are offered. @@ -1854,7 +1854,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportRole -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportRole parameter specifies the transport service on the Mailbox server where the Receive connector is created. Valid values are: @@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteDomain.md index 2b47aa2592..3a98055162 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example creates the remote domain named Contoso for the domain contoso.com ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the remote domain object. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DomainName parameter specifies the SMTP domain that you want to establish as a remote domain. A valid value is an SMTP domain (for example, contoso.com). The maximum length is 256 characters. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteMailbox.md index ad9e5e75d8..f6ce23c884 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ As in Example 1, this example assumes that mail flow and directory synchronizati ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the on-premises mail user and the associated mailbox in the service. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AccountDisabled switch specifies whether to create the mail user in a disabled state. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Equipment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Equipment switch specifies that the mailbox in the service should be created as an equipment resource mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Password parameter specifies the password used by the mail user to secure his or her account and associated mailbox in the service. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Room -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Room switch specifies that the mailbox in the service should be created as a room resource mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Shared -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note**: This switch is available only in Exchange 2013 CU21 or later and Exchange 2016 CU10 or later. To use this switch, you also need to run setup.exe /PrepareAD. For more information, see [KB4133605](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4133605). @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UserPrincipalName parameter specifies the logon name for the user account. The UPN uses an email address format: `username@domain`. Typically, the domain value is the domain where the user account resides. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ACLableSyncedObjectEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ACLableSyncedObjectEnabled switch specifies whether the remote mailbox is an ACLableSyncedMailboxUser. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Archive switch specifies whether to also create an archive mailbox in the service. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail user and the associated mailbox in the service. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesOrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OnPremisesOrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) in the on-premises organization in which the new mailbox is added (for example, redmond.contoso.com/Users). @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemotePowerShellEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemotePowerShellEnabled parameter specifies whether the user has access to Exchange PowerShell. Valid values are: @@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteRoutingAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteRoutingAddress parameter specifies the SMTP address of the mailbox in the service that this user is associated with. This address is created automatically when the service is initially configured in the format of `.mail.onmicrosoft.com`. @@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResetPasswordOnNextLogon parameter specifies whether the user must change their password the next time they log on. Valid values are: @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SamAccountName parameter (also known as the pre-Windows 2000 user account or group name) specifies an object identifier that's compatible with older versions of Microsoft Windows client and server operating systems. The value can contain letters, numbers, spaces, periods (.), and the following characters: !, #, $, %, ^, &, -, \_, {, }, and ~. The last character can't be a period. Unicode characters are allowed, but accented characters might generate collisions (for example, o and ö match). The maximum length is 20 characters. @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicy.md index e52f0a2909..de98de144a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ The second retention tag, which is named Legal, is also enclosed in quotation ma ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the policy name. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionId parameter specifies the identity of the retention policy to ensure mailboxes moved from an on-premises Exchange deployment to the cloud continue to have the same retention policy applied to them. The RetentionId parameter is used in cross-premises deployments. You don't need to specify this parameter in on-premises-only deployments. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionPolicyTagLinks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionPolicyTagLinks parameter specifies the names of retention policy tags to be associated with this policy. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicyTag.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicyTag.md index cd0aad232e..3756a19d8b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicyTag.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicyTag.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ This example creates the retention tag Business Critical of type Personal. When ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the tag. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgeLimitForRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AgeLimitForRetention parameter specifies the age at which retention is enforced on an item. The age limit corresponds to the number of days from the date the item was delivered, or the date an item was created if it wasn't delivered. If this parameter isn't present and the RetentionEnabled parameter is set to $true, an error is returned. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Comment parameter specifies a comment for the tag. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LocalizedComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LocalizedComment parameter specifies localized comments and their languages. When the user's language setting matches a language specified for this parameter, Microsoft Outlook and Outlook on the web display the corresponding localized comment. Comments are specified in the form of ISO Language Code:Comment, for example, LocalizedComment EN-US:"This is a localized comment in U.S. English". @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LocalizedRetentionPolicyTagName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LocalizedRetentionPolicyTagName parameter specifies localized tag names and their languages. When the user's language setting matches a language specified for this parameter, Outlook and Outlook on the web display the corresponding localized tag name. Names are specified in the form of ISO Language Code:Name, for example, LocalizedRetentionPolicyTagName EN-US:"Business Critical". @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedFolderToUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageClass -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageClass parameter specifies the message type to which the tag applies. If not specified, the default value is set to \*. @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MustDisplayCommentEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MustDisplayCommentEnabled parameter specifies whether the comment can be hidden. The default value is $true. @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionAction parameter specifies the action for the retention policy. Valid values are: @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionEnabled parameter specifies whether the tag is enabled. When set to $false, the tag is disabled, and no retention action is taken on messages that have the tag applied. @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionId parameter specifies an alternate tag ID to make sure the retention tag found on mailbox items tagged in an on-premises deployment matches the tag when the mailbox is moved to the cloud, or mailbox items tagged in the cloud match the tag when the mailbox is moved to an on-premises Exchange server. The parameter is used in cross-premises deployments. You don't need to specify this parameter in on-premises-only deployments. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemTag -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SystemTag parameter specifies that the tag is created for internal Exchange functionality. @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Type parameter specifies the type of retention tag being created. Valid values include: @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md index fcd51b4f49..eef83073bd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Because setting the new role assignment as default applies only to new mailboxes ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the new assignment policy. If the assignment policy name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). The maximum length of the name is 64 characters. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Description parameter specifies the description that's displayed when the role assignment policy is viewed using the Get-RoleAssignmentPolicy cmdlet. Enclose the description in quotation marks ("). @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IsDefault switch makes the assignment policy the default assignment policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Roles -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Roles parameter specifies the management roles to assign to the role assignment policy when it's created. If a role name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you want to assign more that one role, separate the role names with commas. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleGroup.md index ac057d2934..35d6bdc6ef 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ This example removes the role assignment between the Distribution Groups managem ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the new role group. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedForeignGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the existing recipient-based management scope to associate with management role assignments created with this role group. If the management scope name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Description parameter specifies the description that's displayed when the role group is viewed using the Get-RoleGroup cmdlet. Enclose the description in quotation marks ("). @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the friendly name of the role group. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). This parameter has a maximum length of 256 characters. @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies the users or USGs who can modify the configuration of a role group or add and remove members to or from a role group. @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Members -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Members parameter specifies the mailboxes or mail-enabled USGs to add as a member of the role group. You can identify the user or group by the name, DN, or primary SMTP address value. You can specify multiple members separated by commas (`Value1,Value2,...ValueN`). If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks (`"Value 1","Value 2",..."Value N"`). @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Roles -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Roles parameter specifies the management roles to assign to the role group when it's created. If a role name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you want to assign more that one role, separate the role names with commas. @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SearchDocumentFormat.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SearchDocumentFormat.md index 4396c8006d..c8313cb96b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SearchDocumentFormat.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SearchDocumentFormat.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example creates a new search document format with an extension of .sct and ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter uniquely identifies the new search document format. For example, an identity of "PropSCT" might specify a proprietary document format which is supported by a custom IFilter. The Identity parameter must be unique within the search document formats. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Extension -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Extension parameter specifies the file type to be processed by the filter and is designated by the common file extension associated with the file type. Examples include .MP3, .JPG and .PNG. Note the leading period. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MimeType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MimeType parameter specifies the MIME type of the format. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name specifies a friendly name for the format, but does not need to be unique. For example, you might have several different formats (supported by custom IFilters) that are used to index output from a proprietary system called "My Business Output". You could use the Name parameter to create a category of formats called "My Business Output Formats" and uniquely identify each format within that group using the Identity parameter. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the new format is enabled at creation. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SendConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SendConnector.md index c200e2ff41..cf81fd379f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SendConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SendConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ To assign a specific authentication credential for the Send connector, you must ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the connector. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names to which the Send connector routes mail. The complete syntax for entering each address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthenticationCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthenticationCredential parameter specifies the username and password that's required to use the connector. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CloudServicesMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note**: We recommend that you don't use this parameter unless you are directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support, or by specific product documentation. Instead, use the Hybrid Configuration wizard to configure mail flow between your on-premises and cloud organizations. For more information, see [Hybrid Configuration wizard](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/hybrid-configuration-wizard). @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionInactivityTimeOut -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectionInactivityTimeOut parameter specifies the maximum time an idle connection can remain open. The default value is ten minutes. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectorType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectorType parameter specifies whether the connector is used in hybrid deployments to send messages to Microsoft 365. Valid values are: @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Custom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Custom switch specifies the Custom usage type. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DNSRoutingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DNSRoutingEnabled parameter specifies whether the Send connector uses Domain Name System (DNS) to route mail. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $true. If you specify a SmartHosts parameter, the DNSRoutingEnabled parameter must be $false. @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainSecureEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainSecureEnabled parameter enables mutual Transport Layer Security (TLS) authentication for the domains serviced by the Send connector when set to $true. Mutual TLS authentication functions correctly only if the following conditions are met: @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the Send connector to process email messages. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ErrorPolicies -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ErrorPolicies parameter specifies how communication errors are treated. Possible values are the following: @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceHELO -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceHELO parameter specifies whether HELO is sent instead of the default EHLO. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fqdn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Fqdn parameter specifies the FQDN used as the source server for connected messaging servers that use the Send connector to receive outgoing messages. The value of this parameter is displayed to connected messaging servers whenever a source server name is required, as in the following examples: @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FrontendProxyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FrontendProxyEnabled parameter routes outbound messages through the CAS server, where destination specific routing, such as DNS or IP address, is set, when the parameter is set to $true. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreSTARTTLS -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreSTARTTLS parameter specifies whether to ignore the StartTLS option offered by a remote sending server. This parameter is used with remote domains. This parameter must be set to $false if the RequireTLS parameter is set to $true. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internal -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internal switch specifies the Internal usage type. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internet switch specifies the Internet usage type. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers with the Transport service. When the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in the Exchange organization. When the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can only be used by Transport service on Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. The default value is $false. @@ -686,7 +686,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can pass through a connector. The default value is 25 MB. @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Partner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Partner switch specifies the Partner usage type. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Port -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Port parameter specifies the port number for smart host forwarding, if you specify a value in the SmartHosts parameter. The valid input range is an integer from 0 through 65535. The default value is 25. In most organizations, the port number is set to 25. @@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProtocolLoggingLevel parameter specifies whether to enable protocol logging. Verbose enables protocol logging. None disables protocol logging. The location of the Send connector protocol logs for all Send connectors configured in the Transport service on a Mailbox server or on an Edge server is specified with the SendProtocolLogPath parameter of the Set-TransportService cmdlet. @@ -779,7 +779,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireOorg -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireTLS -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireTLS parameter specifies whether all messages sent through this connector must be transmitted using TLS. The default value is $false. @@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmartHostAuthMechanism -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SmartHostAuthMechanism parameter specifies the smart host authentication mechanism to use for authentication with a remote server. Use this parameter only when a smart host is configured and the DNSRoutingEnabled parameter is set to $false. Valid values are None, BasicAuth, BasicAuthRequireTLS, ExchangeServer, and ExternalAuthoritative. All values are mutually exclusive. If you select BasicAuth or BasicAuthRequireTLS, you must use the AuthenticationCredential parameter to specify the authentication credential. @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmartHosts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SmartHosts parameter specifies the smart hosts the Send connector uses to route mail. This parameter is required if you set the DNSRoutingEnabled parameter to $false and it must be specified on the same command line. The SmartHosts parameter takes one or more FQDNs, such as server.contoso.com, or one or more IP addresses, or a combination of both FQDNs and IP addresses. If you enter an IP address, you must enter the IP address as a literal. For example, 10.10.1.1. The smart host identity can be the FQDN of a smart-host server, a mail exchanger (MX) record, or an address (A) record. If you configure an FQDN as the smart host identity, the source server for the Send connector must be able to use DNS name resolution to locate the smart host server. @@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of messages the server can send per connection. @@ -871,7 +871,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceIPAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceIPAddress parameter specifies the local IP address to use as the endpoint for an SMTP connection to a remote messaging server. The default IP address is 0.0.0.0. This value means that the server can use any available local IP address. This parameter is valid only for Send connectors configured on an Edge server. @@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the names of the Mailbox servers that can use this Send connector. This parameter isn't valid for Send connectors configured on an Edge server. @@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsAuthLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsAuthLevel parameter specifies the TLS authentication level that is used for outbound TLS connections established by this Send connector. Valid values are: @@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. A valid value for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`. The X.500Issuer value is found in the certificate's Issuer field, and the X.500Subject value is found in the certificate's Subject field. You can find these values by running the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet. Or, after you run Get-ExchangeCertificate to find the thumbprint value of the certificate, run the command `$TLSCert = Get-ExchangeCertificate -Thumbprint `, run the command `$TLSCertName = "$($TLSCert.Issuer)$($TLSCert.Subject)"`, and then use the value $TLSCertName for this parameter. @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsDomain parameter specifies the domain name that the Send connector uses to verify the FQDN of the target certificate when establishing a TLS secured connection. @@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Usage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Usage parameter specifies the default permissions and authentication methods assigned to the Send connector. The valid values are as follows: Custom, Internal, Internet, or Partner. The default is Custom. @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseExternalDNSServersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseExternalDNSServersEnabled parameter specifies whether this Send connector uses the external DNS list specified by the ExternalDNSServers parameter of the Set-TransportService cmdlet. The default value is $false. @@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SettingOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SettingOverride.md index cbecf3513b..1d19d09a98 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SettingOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SettingOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ For more information, see the topic [Change the offline address book generation ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the setting override. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Component -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Component parameter specifies the component that the setting override is applied to. For example: @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Parameters parameter specifies one or more parameters for the override that are available for the combination of the Component and Section parameter values. This parameter uses the syntax: `@("Parameter1=Value1","Parameter2=Value2"...)`. For example: @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Reason -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Reason parameter specifies why you are creating the setting override. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Section -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Section parameter specifies the name of the section for which the override is created. The available values for this parameter depend on the value of the Component parameter. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxVersion parameter specifies the latest version of Exchange 2016 that this override applies to (up to and including the specified value). @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MinVersion parameter specifies the earliest version of Exchange 2016 that this override applies to (up to and including the specified value). @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the name of the Exchange 2016 server where you want the override applied. You can specify a single Exchange 2016 server name, or an array of Exchange 2016 server name wildcards. For example, if you have three Exchange 2016 servers named Exchange01, Exchange02 and Exchange03, specify the value Exchange\* to apply the override to all of them. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SharingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SharingPolicy.md index fd98707686..ab74be08f1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SharingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SharingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example creates a default sharing policy, which is applied to all mailboxes ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the new sharing policy. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Domains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Domains parameter specifies the domains and the associated sharing options for those domains in the sharing policy. Values for this parameter use the basic syntax: `'Domain: SharingPolicyAction'`. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Default -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Default switch specifies that this sharing policy is the default sharing policy for all mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the new sharing policy. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default is $true. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailbox.md index 6d87b66bcf..16c70bd0be 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ You can't run this cmdlet from the Exchange Management Shell. Use SharePoint to ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name that displays in the user's global address list and on SharePoint. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharePointUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SharePointUrl parameter specifies the SharePoint URL where the site mailbox is hosted, for example, "https://myserver/teams/edu". @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Alias parameter specifies the alias of the site mailbox. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter specifies the mailbox database that holds the mailbox data for the site mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the site mailbox. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the organizational unit in which the site mailbox resides. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OverrideRecipientQuotas -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md index 78730144a7..34c86fc233 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This example creates the default provisioning policy named SM\_DefaultPolicy and ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the site mailbox provisioning policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AliasPrefix -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AliasPrefix parameter specifies the custom text prefix to add to the aliases of new site mailboxes. Valid values are: @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultAliasPrefixEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultAliasPrefixEnabled parameter specifies whether new site mailboxes have the default prefix text added to the alias. Valid values are: @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsDefault switch specifies that the site mailbox provisioning policy is the default policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the site mailbox. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProhibitSendReceiveQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send or receive new messages. Messages sent to the mailbox are returned to the sender with a descriptive error message. This value effectively determines the maximum size of the mailbox. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SweepRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SweepRule.md index a0e63f4d33..6de7b9487a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SweepRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SweepRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example creates a new Sweep rule named "From Jeff" in Felipe Apodaca's mail ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the Sweep rule. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Provider -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Provider parameter specifies the provider for the Sweep rule. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DestinationFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DestinationFolder parameter specifies an action for the Sweep rule that moves messages to the specified folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the Sweep rule is enabled or disabled. Valid values are: @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFlagged -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfPinned -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -KeepForDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The KeepForDays parameter specifies an action for the Sweep rule that specifies the number of days to keep messages that match the conditions of the rule. After the number of days have passed, the messages are moved to the location that's specified by the DestinationFolder parameter (by default, the Deleted Items folder). @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -KeepLatest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The KeepLatest parameter specifies an action for the Sweep rule that specifies the number of messages to keep that match the conditions of the rule. After the number of messages is exceeded, the oldest messages are moved to the location that's specified by the DestinationFolder parameter (by default, the Deleted Items folder). @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox where you want to create the Sweep rule. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Sender -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Sender parameter specifies a condition for the Sweep rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. For internal senders, you can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceFolder parameter specifies a condition for the Sweep rule that looks for messages in the specified folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SystemCategory parameter specifies a condition for the sweep rule that looks for messages with the specified system category. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SyncMailPublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SyncMailPublicFolder.md index 8c39847c58..26111affea 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SyncMailPublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SyncMailPublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ This cmdlet is only used by the Import-MailPublicFoldersForMigration.ps1 and Syn ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail-enabled public folder. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EntryId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Contacts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Contacts parameter specifies the contacts for the public folder. Contacts are persons about whom you can save several types of information, such as addresses, telephone numbers, and web page URLs. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliverToMailboxAndForward -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeliverToMailboxAndForward parameter specifies the message delivery behavior when a forwarding address is specified by the ForwardingAddress parameter. Valid values are: @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail-enabled public folder. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies an email address outside the organization. @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardingAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardingAddress parameter specifies a forwarding address for messages that are sent to this mail-enabled public folder. A valid value for this parameter is a recipient in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this mail-enabled public folder. Although messages send on behalf of the public folder clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the public folder, not the sender. @@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled switch specifies that this recipient is not visible in address lists. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the mail-enabled public folder. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxSendSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent by the mail-enabled public folder. @@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesObjectId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OnPremisesObjectId parameter specifies the GUID of the on-premises mail-enabled public folder that's used to create the mail-enabled public folder object in Exchange Online. @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OverrideRecipientQuotas -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -798,7 +798,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SystemMessage.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SystemMessage.md index 5f57d4f5d4..5adbdc6072 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SystemMessage.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SystemMessage.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example creates a custom English quota message for mailboxes that exceed th ### -DsnCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DsnCode parameter specifies the enhanced status code for the custom system message. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internal -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internal parameter specifies whether the system message is displayed to internal or external users. Valid values are: @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Language parameter specifies the language of the message (for example, en for English or ja for Japanese). For the list of supported language codes, see [Supported languages for NDRs](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/non-delivery-reports-and-bounce-messages/ndr-procedures#supported-languages-for-ndrs). @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QuotaMessageType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QuotaMessageType parameter specifies the quota for the custom system message. Valid values are: @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Text -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Text parameter specifies the text in the custom system message. The text should explain why the system message was sent, and any actions that the user should take. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ThrottlingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ThrottlingPolicy.md index d98958dff8..4cdeb36baf 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ThrottlingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ThrottlingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ This example creates a throttling policy that restricts a user to be able to onl ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the object in Active Directory. The default policy is named `DefaultThrottlingPolicy`. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an anonymous user before the user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an anonymous user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many anonymous connections can be made to a user's calendar data at the same time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If anonymous users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The AnonymousMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 1. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an anonymous user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ComplianceMaxExpansionDGRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ComplianceMaxExpansionDGRecipients parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients to expand in distribution groups when a discovery search is looking for a specified recipient. @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ComplianceMaxExpansionNestedDGs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ComplianceMaxExpansionNestedDGs parameter specifies the maximum number of nested distribution groups to expand when a discovery search is looking for a specified recipient. @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CpaCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a cross-premises user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CpaMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a cross-premises user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CPAMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections a cross-premises user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The CpaMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CpaRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which a cross premises user budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxConcurrency parameter specifies the number of concurrent discovery search executions that a user can have at the same time. To modify the discovery throttling parameters, create a new policy and name it "DiscoveryThrottlingPolicy". @@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxKeywords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxKeywords parameter specifies the maximum number of keywords that a user can include in a discovery search. For more information, see [Search-Mailbox](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/exchangepowershell/search-mailbox). @@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxKeywordsPerPage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxKeywordsPerPage parameter specifies the number of keywords for which to show statistics on a single page in the EAC. @@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxMailboxes parameter specifies the maximum number of source mailboxes that a user can include in a discovery search. @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxPreviewSearchMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxPreviewSearchMailboxes parameter specifies the maximum number of mailboxes that a user can include in eDiscovery Search Preview. @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxRefinerResults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -824,7 +824,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxSearchQueueDepth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxSearchQueueDepth parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent discovery search threads that can be active at the same time. @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxStatsSearchMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxStatsSearchMailboxes parameter specifies the maximum number of mailboxes that a user can search in an In-Place eDiscovery search without being able to view the statistics. When the number of mailboxes configured with the DiscoveryMaxStatsSearchMailboxes parameter is exceeded, the user must copy the search results to a discovery mailbox to view the statistics for the discovery search. For more information, see [In-Place eDiscovery in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/policy-and-compliance/ediscovery/ediscovery). @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryPreviewSearchResultsPageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryPreviewSearchResultsPageSize parameter specifies the number of messages displayed on a single page in eDiscovery Search Preview. @@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoverySearchTimeoutPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoverySearchTimeoutPeriod parameter specifies the number of minutes that a discovery search runs before it times out. @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Exchange ActiveSync user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Exchange ActiveSync user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -952,7 +952,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EASMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Exchange ActiveSync user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The EasMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 10. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EASMaxDeviceDeletesPerMonth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxDeviceDeletesPerMonth parameter specifies a limit to the number of Exchange ActiveSync partnerships that a user can delete per month. By default, each user can delete a maximum of 20 partnerships per calendar month. When the limit is reached, the partnership deletion attempt fails and an error message is displayed to the user. @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EASMaxDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxDevices parameter specifies a limit to the number of Exchange ActiveSync partnerships that a user can have at one time. By default, each user can create 100 Exchange ActiveSync partnerships with their Exchange account. After users exceed the limit, they must delete one of their existing partnerships before they can create any more new partnerships. An email error message describing the limitation is sent to the user when the limit is exceeded. Additionally, an event is logged in the Application log when a user exceeds the limit. @@ -1006,7 +1006,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasMaxInactivityForDeviceCleanup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxInactivityForDeviceCleanup parameter specifies the length of time that a user's device partnerships remain active. By default, there is no limit to the number of days that a user's device partnerships remain active. Use this value if you want to minimize the amount of inactive device partnerships in your organization. To use this setting, specify a value in days since the user's last sync time to cause the device partnership to be removed. @@ -1084,7 +1084,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Exchange ActiveSync user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1120,7 +1120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1156,7 +1156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1174,7 +1174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1210,7 +1210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1246,7 +1246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsCostThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsCostThreshold parameter specifies the cost threshold for Exchange Web Services users. @@ -1264,7 +1264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Exchange Web Services user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Exchange Web Services user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1340,7 +1340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EWSMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Exchange Web Services user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The EwsMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 10. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -1358,7 +1358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EWSMaxSubscriptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsMaxSubscriptions parameter specifies the maximum number of active push and pull subscriptions that an Exchange Web Services user can have on a specified Exchange server at the same time. If a user tries to create more subscriptions than the configured maximum, the subscription fails, and an event is logged in Event Viewer. @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Exchange Web Services user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeMaxCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExchangeMaxCmdlets parameter specifies the number of cmdlets that can be executed within a specific time period before their execution is slowed down. The value specified by this parameter should be less than the value specified by the PowerShellMaxCmdlets parameter. @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardeeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForwardeeLimit parameter specifies the limits for the number of recipients that can be configured in Inbox Rules when using the forward or redirect action. This parameter doesn't limit the number of messages that can be forwarded or redirected to the recipients that are configured. @@ -1492,7 +1492,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an IMAP user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -1510,7 +1510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an IMAP user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1528,7 +1528,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IMAPMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an IMAP user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The ImapMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -1606,7 +1606,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the IMAP user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1624,7 +1624,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsServiceAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsServiceAccount switch specifies that the user accounts associated with this policy are moderated by per-user thresholds and the health of system resources (for example, overall CPU usage). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1646,7 +1646,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRateLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRateLimit parameter specifies the number of messages per minute that can be submitted to transport by POP3 or IMAP4 clients that use SMTP. Clients receive a transient error if they submit messages at a rate that exceeds the value of this parameter. Exchange attempts to connect and send the messages at a later time. @@ -1664,7 +1664,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1682,7 +1682,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1700,7 +1700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxSocketConnectionsPerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxSocketConnectionsPerUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1754,7 +1754,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxSubscriptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1772,7 +1772,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1790,7 +1790,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Outlook on the web user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Outlook on the web user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1826,7 +1826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Outlook on the web user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -1908,7 +1908,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Outlook on the web user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1926,7 +1926,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Outlook on the web voice user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -1944,7 +1944,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Outlook on the web voice user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1962,7 +1962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Outlook on the web voice user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The OwaVoiceMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 5. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -1980,7 +1980,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Outlook on the web voice user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1998,7 +1998,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -2016,7 +2016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2034,7 +2034,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -POPMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections a POP user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The PopMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 20. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -2112,7 +2112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the user budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2130,7 +2130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -2148,7 +2148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth parameter specifies the number of operations allowed to be executed by the user. This value directly affects the behavior of the PowerShellMaxCmdlets and PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameters. For example, the PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter consumes at least two operations defined by the PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth parameter but additional operations are also consumed per cmdlet execution. The number of operations depends on the cmdlets executed. We recommend that the value for the PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth parameter be at least three times larger than the value of the PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter. This parameter doesn't affect Exchange admin center operations or Exchange Web Services operations. @@ -2184,7 +2184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxCmdlets parameter specifies the number of cmdlets that can be executed within a specific time period before their execution is stopped. The value specified by this parameter should be more than the value specified by the ExchangeMaxCmdlets parameter. The time period used for this limit is specified by the PowerShellMaxCmdletsTimePeriod parameter. Both values should be set at the same time. @@ -2202,7 +2202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxCmdletsTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxCmdletsTimePeriod parameter specifies the time period, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine whether the number of cmdlets being executed exceeds the limits specified by the PowerShellMaxCmdlets and ExchangeMaxCmdlets parameters. @@ -2220,7 +2220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter specifies different information depending on context: @@ -2243,7 +2243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets parameter specifies the number of destructive cmdlets that can be executed within a specific time period before their execution is stopped. Destructive cmdlets are cmdlets that can make significant changes to user data and configuration settings in your Exchange organization. Throttling these cmdlets might help prevent accidental data loss. The following cmdlets are designated as destructive: @@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdletsTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdletsTimePeriod parameter specifies the time period, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine how many destructive cmdlets can be run. You set a value for this parameter when you set the PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets parameter. Both values should be set at the same time. For more information, see the description for the PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets parameter. @@ -2291,7 +2291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxOperations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxOperations parameter specifies the protocol-level operations that are used to send and receive data. If the execution of a cmdlet results in a significant number of operations (for example, if there is a lot of input/output occurring), throttling might occur. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2309,7 +2309,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxRunspaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxRunspaces parameter specifies the number of concurrent Windows PowerShell sessions that a user is allowed to have. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2327,7 +2327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxRunspacesTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxRunspacesTimePeriod parameter specifies the time period, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine how many Windows PowerShell sessions can be run. You set this value when you set the PowerShellMaxRunspaces parameter. @@ -2345,7 +2345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency parameter limits the number of concurrent Windows PowerShell connections per tenant organization. By default, the limit for concurrent Windows PowerShell connections per tenant organization is set to 9. If users in a tenant organization try to make more concurrent requests than the limit set by the PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency parameter, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. This limit is enforced even if a single user hasn't exceeded the per-user limit set by the PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter. The PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 100 inclusive. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -2365,7 +2365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxTenantRunspaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxTenantRunspaces parameter specifies the number of concurrent Windows PowerShell sessions that a tenant is allowed to have. @@ -2383,7 +2383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the user budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2401,7 +2401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PswsMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PswsMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections a Windows PowerShell Web Services user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PswsMaxRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PswsMaxRequest parameter specifies how many requests a Windows PowerShell Web Services user can have against an Exchange server at one time. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2439,7 +2439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PswsMaxRequestTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PswsMaxRequestTimePeriod parameter specifies the period of time, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine how many requests can be run. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2457,7 +2457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2475,7 +2475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2493,7 +2493,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationMaxBurstPerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2511,7 +2511,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2529,7 +2529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2547,7 +2547,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationRechargeRatePerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2565,7 +2565,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationSamplingPeriodPerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2583,7 +2583,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -2601,7 +2601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2619,7 +2619,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RCAMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an RPC Client Access user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until the connection is closed or the connection is otherwise disconnected (for example, if the user goes offline). If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -2701,7 +2701,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the budget for the user is charged (how much the budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2719,7 +2719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaSharedCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for all users before they're completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -2737,7 +2737,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaShardMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that all users can consume elevated amounts of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2755,7 +2755,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaSharedMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections all RPC Client Access users can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until the connection is closed or the connection is otherwise disconnected (for example, if users go offline). If there are more concurrent requests than the policy allows, new connection attempts fail. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -2775,7 +2775,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaSharedRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the budget for all users is charged (how much the budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2793,7 +2793,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRateLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientRateLimit parameter specifies the limits on the number of recipients that a user can address in a 24-hour period. @@ -2811,7 +2811,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2829,7 +2829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2847,7 +2847,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2865,7 +2865,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2883,7 +2883,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuiteCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2901,7 +2901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuiteMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2919,7 +2919,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuiteMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2937,7 +2937,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuiteRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2955,7 +2955,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicyScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThrottlingPolicyScope parameter specifies the scope of the throttling policy. You can use the following values. @@ -2979,7 +2979,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-TransportRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-TransportRule.md index 465d011257..f05877d0a4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-TransportRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-TransportRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ This example creates a rule with the following settings: ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the rule. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivationDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ActivationDate parameter specifies when the rule starts processing messages. The rule doesn't take any action on messages until the specified date/time. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADComparisonAttribute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADComparisonOperator -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddManagerAsRecipientType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddToRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfRecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyHtmlDisclaimerFallbackAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyHtmlDisclaimerLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyHtmlDisclaimerText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -857,7 +857,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentExtensionMatchesWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentHasExecutableContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentIsPasswordProtected -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentIsUnsupported -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentNameMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentProcessingLimitExceeded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentPropertyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1166,7 +1166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BetweenMemberOf1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1197,7 +1197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BetweenMemberOf2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlindCopyTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -1259,7 +1259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Comments parameter specifies optional descriptive text for the rule (for example, what the rule is used for, or how it has changed over time). The length of the comment can't exceed 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1277,7 +1277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1298,7 +1298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentCharacterSetContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1322,7 +1322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -1353,7 +1353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -1378,7 +1378,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Disconnect -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1403,7 +1403,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DlpPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1423,7 +1423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1445,7 +1445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the new rule is created as enabled or disabled. Valid values are: @@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfADComparisonAttribute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1522,7 +1522,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfADComparisonOperator -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1547,7 +1547,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1582,7 +1582,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1617,7 +1617,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1643,7 +1643,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfRecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1669,7 +1669,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1704,7 +1704,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1739,7 +1739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1809,7 +1809,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1833,7 +1833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentExtensionMatchesWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1857,7 +1857,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentHasExecutableContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1884,7 +1884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentIsPasswordProtected -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1909,7 +1909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentIsUnsupported -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1940,7 +1940,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1966,7 +1966,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentNameMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1988,7 +1988,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentProcessingLimitExceeded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2015,7 +2015,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentPropertyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2056,7 +2056,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2088,7 +2088,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBetweenMemberOf1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2119,7 +2119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBetweenMemberOf2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2150,7 +2150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfContentCharacterSetContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2174,7 +2174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2207,7 +2207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2231,7 +2231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2257,7 +2257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2290,7 +2290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2315,7 +2315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2343,7 +2343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasNoClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2368,7 +2368,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasSenderOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2395,7 +2395,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2417,7 +2417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2443,7 +2443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderMatchesMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2465,7 +2465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2489,7 +2489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfManagerAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2522,7 +2522,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfManagerForEvaluatedUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2549,7 +2549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageContainsDataClassifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2577,7 +2577,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2609,7 +2609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2641,7 +2641,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2699,7 +2699,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2755,7 +2755,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2777,7 +2777,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2801,7 +2801,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2845,7 +2845,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSCLOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2872,7 +2872,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2930,7 +2930,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2986,7 +2986,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3032,7 +3032,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderIpRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3062,7 +3062,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderManagementRelationship -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3087,7 +3087,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3118,7 +3118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3147,7 +3147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3174,7 +3174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3200,7 +3200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3222,7 +3222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3248,7 +3248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3270,7 +3270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3296,7 +3296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExpiryDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3318,7 +3318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -From -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3351,7 +3351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3375,7 +3375,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3401,7 +3401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3434,7 +3434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3459,7 +3459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenerateIncidentReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3490,7 +3490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenerateNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3523,7 +3523,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3551,7 +3551,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasNoClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3576,7 +3576,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasSenderOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3603,7 +3603,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3625,7 +3625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3651,7 +3651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderMatchesMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3673,7 +3673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3697,7 +3697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncidentReportContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3765,7 +3765,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogEventText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3795,7 +3795,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagerAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3828,7 +3828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagerForEvaluatedUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3855,7 +3855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageContainsDataClassifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3885,7 +3885,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3917,7 +3917,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3949,7 +3949,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Mode parameter specifies how the rule operates. Valid values are: @@ -3971,7 +3971,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerateMessageByManager -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3998,7 +3998,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerateMessageByUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4031,7 +4031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotifySender -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4067,7 +4067,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrependSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4091,7 +4091,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, the value 0 is the highest priority, and rules can't have the same priority value. @@ -4117,7 +4117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Quarantine -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4144,7 +4144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4202,7 +4202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4258,7 +4258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4280,7 +4280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4327,7 +4327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4371,7 +4371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RedirectMessageTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4402,7 +4402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessageEnhancedStatusCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4430,7 +4430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessageReasonText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4462,7 +4462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4587,7 +4587,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RouteMessageOutboundRequireTls -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4612,7 +4612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RuleErrorAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RuleErrorAction parameter specifies what to do if rule processing can't be completed on messages. Valid values are: @@ -4633,7 +4633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RuleSubType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RuleSubType parameter specifies the rule type. Valid values are: @@ -4654,7 +4654,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4681,7 +4681,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4739,7 +4739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4795,7 +4795,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderAddressLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SenderAddressLocation parameter specifies where to look for sender addresses in conditions and exceptions that examine sender email addresses. Valid values are: @@ -4825,7 +4825,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4871,7 +4871,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderIpRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4901,7 +4901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderManagementRelationship -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4926,7 +4926,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4957,7 +4957,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4990,7 +4990,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5017,7 +5017,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetAuditSeverity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5044,7 +5044,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetHeaderName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5066,7 +5066,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetHeaderValue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5088,7 +5088,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetSCL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5113,7 +5113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpRejectMessageRejectStatusCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5137,7 +5137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpRejectMessageRejectText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5161,7 +5161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StopRuleProcessing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5186,7 +5186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5212,7 +5212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5234,7 +5234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5260,7 +5260,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5282,7 +5282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseLegacyRegex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UseLegacyRegex parameter specifies whether the rule uses regular expression syntax that's compatible with Exchange Server 2010. Valid values are: @@ -5303,7 +5303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -5321,7 +5321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md index a3d3fc0bc0..5fd6367dd4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example creates a virtual directory under the non-default website www.conto ### -ApplicationRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationRoot parameter specifies the metabase path of the virtual directory. By default, this path is the same as the website in which the virtual directory is created. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter specifies the IIS application pool in which the virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolIdForManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolIdForManagement parameter specifies the pool of programs that manages the virtual directory. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GzipLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GzipLevel parameter sets the Gzip configuration for the Exchange Web Services virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalNLBBypassUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalNLBBypassUrl parameter specifies the URL of the Exchange server that has the Client Access server role installed, regardless of whether it's behind a Network Load Balancing (NLB) array or not. @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MRSProxyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MRSProxyEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable MRSProxy for the Mailbox server. MRSProxy is a service that runs on Mailbox servers in a remote forest and helps to proxy a mailbox move. For more information, see [Mailbox moves in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/recipients/mailbox-moves). @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OAuthAuthentication parameter specifies whether OAuth authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter sets the path of the virtual directory in the metabase. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the website under which to create the virtual directory. This parameter shouldn't be used when you're creating a virtual directory under the default website. @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSecurityAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WSSecurityAuthentication parameter specifies whether WS-Security (Web Services Security) authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md index af13148098..076d4f9729 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ This example creates an external relay domain for the X.400 namespace Europe org ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the X.400 authoritative domain. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -X400DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The X400DomainName parameter specifies the X.400 namespace, which can only include the X.400 organizational components. Specifically, only the following attribute types are supported: @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -X400ExternalRelay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The X400ExternalRelay parameter specifies authoritative domain an external relay domain. If you set the X400ExternalRelay parameter to $true, Microsoft Exchange routes email to the external address and doesn't treat resolution failures to this subdomain as an error. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Redirect-Message.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Redirect-Message.md index 4ff9812e91..05f186c4c4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Redirect-Message.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Redirect-Message.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example drains the active messages from the delivery queues on the Mailbox ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the source Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Target -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Target parameter specifies the target Mailbox server where you want to transfer the messages from the drained delivery queues. Enter the server name as a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ADPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ADPermission.md index 590b14b804..f51aa603d1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ADPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ADPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ This example removes the ability for anonymous users to send messages through th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the object from which the permission should be removed. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Instance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Instance parameter enables you to pass an entire object to the command to be processed. It's mainly used in scripts where an entire object must be passed to the command. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The User parameter specifies whose permissions are being removed from the Active Directory object. You can specify the following types of users or groups: @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccessRights -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AccessRights parameter specifies the rights that you want to remove from the user on the Active Directory object. Valid values include: @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ChildObjectTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ChildObjectTypes parameter specifies what type of object the permission should be removed from. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Deny -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Deny switch specifies that the permissions you're removing are Deny permissions. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedRights -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedRights parameter specifies the extended rights to remove. @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InheritanceType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InheritanceType parameter specifies how permissions are inherited. Valid values are: @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InheritedObjectType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InheritedObjectType parameter specifies what kind of object inherits this access control entry (ACE). @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Properties -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Properties parameter specifies what properties the object contains. @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AcceptedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AcceptedDomain.md index 4d52a5ac4c..e52512ac6c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AcceptedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AcceptedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the accepted domain Contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the accepted domain you want to remove. Enter either the GUID or the name of the remote domain. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDevice.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDevice.md index 53d507564f..e999d2e4a6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDevice.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDevice.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ This example removes the mobile device partnership for the device named Tablet\_ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter uniquely identifies the specific device partnership to be removed. @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md index 252701126d..749904cbf9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes all device access rules that have a name that starts with C ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the device access rule. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceClass.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceClass.md index 4cb1c29820..ae96896997 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceClass.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceClass.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example retrieves the list of devices connecting to Microsoft Exchange and ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the group of devices on which to scope the task. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md index 529397252e..d800c7776c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example removes the mobile device mailbox policy named Management and bypas ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device mailbox policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md index 781217db58..0d298379c4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example removes a custom Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory from the ser ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressBookPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressBookPolicy.md index e878164f2d..a074082f24 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressBookPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressBookPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example deletes the address book policy Murchison's Class. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the address book policy that you want to remove. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressList.md index 02ce9abe28..9def5d8847 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example removes the address list named AddressList1 and all of its child ad ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the address list that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recursive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recursive switch specifies whether to remove all child address lists. You don't need to specify a value for this switch. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressRewriteEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressRewriteEntry.md index e4e75d866f..63385b48ca 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressRewriteEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressRewriteEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example removes all address rewrite entries that include contoso.com in the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the address rewrite entry you want to remove. The Identity parameter accepts a GUID or the unique address rewrite name. You can omit the Identity parameter label. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-App.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-App.md index 1c77501a84..0d998b170b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-App.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-App.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example removes the Finance Test app installed for user Tony. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the AppID (GUID value) of the app that you want to remove. To find the GUID value of an app, run the command Get-App | Format-Table -Auto DisplayName,AppId. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationApp -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationApp switch specifies that the scope of the app is organizational. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrivateCatalog switch specifies that the app you want to remove is located in a private catalog. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AttachmentFilterEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AttachmentFilterEntry.md index 2ba825ebe3..ea755ecb19 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AttachmentFilterEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AttachmentFilterEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes the attachment filter entry that filters attachments that h ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the type of attachment that this filter entry removes. The Identity parameter accepts values in the format Type:Name, where Type is one of the following two values: @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthRedirect.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthRedirect.md index 42edc677b5..2b6f344d38 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthRedirect.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthRedirect.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes all existing OAuth redirection objects from your organizati ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the existing OAuth redirection object that you want to remove. The object name uses the syntax `AuthRedirect-Bearer-GUID`. The easiest way to find the name of the OAuth redirection object is to run Get-AuthRedirect. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthServer.md index a611561cbd..7fb750f295 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the authorization server named AMC. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the authorization server object that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the authorization server. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthenticationPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthenticationPolicy.md index 2a4e144071..c6053a0e63 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthenticationPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthenticationPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example enables legacy Exchange tokens to be issued to ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the authentication policy you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md index 32c9ff50f0..d8cc8b9d69 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the Autodiscover virtual directory from the site autodiscov ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Autodiscover virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md index 3f035835bd..3fb0f0cda6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example immediately removes the availability address space object named Con ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the availability address that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the object. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-CalendarEvents.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-CalendarEvents.md index 37af6e5b5e..bee5da9ccb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-CalendarEvents.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-CalendarEvents.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example previews the meetings that would be cancelled in Jacob Berger's cal ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueryWindowInDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The QueryWindowInDays parameter specifies the number of days after the QueryStartDate parameter value to look for meetings that you want to cancel. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CancelOrganizedMeetings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CancelOrganizedMeetings switch specifies whether to cancel meetings in the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreviewOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreviewOnly switch specifies whether to preview the results of the command without actually cancelling any meetings. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueryStartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The QueryStartDate parameter specifies the start date to look for meetings that you want to cancel. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClassificationRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClassificationRuleCollection.md index 67d123a26f..0ff6b967a2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClassificationRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClassificationRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the classification rule collection named External Classific ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the classification rule collection you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the classification rule collection. For example, you can specify the name, rule collection name or distinguished name (DN) of the classification rule collection. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClientAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClientAccessRule.md index 81d804fa9c..834cc6b4ad 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClientAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClientAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example removes the existing client access rule named "Block Connections fr ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the client access rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the client access rule. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSearch.md index 523371b286..7c9d9fe70d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example removes the compliance search named Case 1234 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search that you want to remove. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md index b389657e6e..c5d810d5e4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example removes the compliance security filter named HR Filter. ### -FilterName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The FilterName parameter specifies the name of the compliance security filter that you want to remove. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ContentFilterPhrase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ContentFilterPhrase.md index 8598c8c44c..70e9dfa355 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ContentFilterPhrase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ContentFilterPhrase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example removes the custom phrase Free credit report from the list of phras ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies a custom word or phrase to remove. You must enclose the value of the Identity parameter in quotation marks ("). @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Phrase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Phrase parameter specifies a custom word or phrase to remove. You must enclose the value of the Phrase parameter in quotation marks ("). @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DataClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DataClassification.md index 11847d2a17..18bff51df5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DataClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DataClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the data classification rule named "Contoso Confidential". ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the data classification rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the data classification rule. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index d80ad23b93..5438ddd878 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example, deletes the DAG DAG1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG to be removed. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md index 398452c4aa..aa5781d103 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the DAG network DAGNetwork04 from the DAG DAG1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the network being removed. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupServer.md index 47cfb67982..ee1ceedf9a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes the configuration settings for the Mailbox server MBX4 from ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG from which you're removing the server. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxServer parameter specifies the Mailbox server to remove from the DAG. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationOnly switch remove the Mailbox server from the DAG object in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDagValidation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipDagValidation switch specifies whether to bypass the validation of the DAG's quorum model and the health check on the DAG's witness when removing members from the DAG. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DeliveryAgentConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DeliveryAgentConnector.md index f44ef1cb27..3194730264 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DeliveryAgentConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DeliveryAgentConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the delivery agent connector named Contoso Delivery Agent C ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or name of the delivery agent connector. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroup.md index cf0c056d74..383997a66e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the distribution group named Temporary Staff. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the distribution group or mail-enabled security group that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroupMember.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroupMember.md index 4e4bc7777a..48f4e68cfb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroupMember.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroupMember.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes Jan Dryml from the distribution group named Technical Suppo ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the distribution group or mail-enabled security group that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Member -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Member parameter specifies the recipient that you want to remove from the group. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicy.md index 7f63c45109..95997ba529 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the existing DLP policy named Contoso PII. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the DLP policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicyTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicyTemplate.md index bce7076d60..dad0fa5c40 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicyTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicyTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the DLP policy template named External DLP Policy Template. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the DLP policy template you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the DLP policy template. For example, you can specify the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the DLP policy template. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DynamicDistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DynamicDistributionGroup.md index 2070951572..d39e9ff8ea 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DynamicDistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DynamicDistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example deletes the dynamic distribution group named Test Users. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the dynamic distribution group that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the dynamic distribution group. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EcpVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EcpVirtualDirectory.md index f38307da67..675fe966a7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EcpVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EcpVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the ECP virtual directory named ecp located on the default ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ECP virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EdgeSubscription.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EdgeSubscription.md index ab2e694756..be87832098 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EdgeSubscription.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EdgeSubscription.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example removes Edge Subscription for the Edge Transport server named Edge1 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the Edge Transport server for which you want to remove Edge Subscription. The identity is expressed as the host name of the Edge Transport server. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EmailAddressPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EmailAddressPolicy.md index 659c486619..6c2632e510 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EmailAddressPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EmailAddressPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the email address policy named Southwest Executives. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the email address policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ExchangeCertificate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ExchangeCertificate.md index 759c87b53a..d0baf2ebd7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ExchangeCertificate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ExchangeCertificate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example uses the same settings, but removes the certificate from the server ### -Thumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Thumbprint parameter specifies the certificate that you want to remove. You can find the thumbprint value by using the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the certificate that you want to remove. Valid values are: @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederatedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederatedDomain.md index a902c0d79e..e9808471ac 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederatedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederatedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the federated domain contoso.co.uk from the federated organ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies the federated domain name to be removed from the federated organization identifier. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch specifies whether to suppress warning or confirmation messages when removing a federated domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederationTrust.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederationTrust.md index 7fe23723a4..cc5b1d537f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederationTrust.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederationTrust.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the federation trust Microsoft Federation Gateway. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the federation trust being removed. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ForeignConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ForeignConnector.md index ec31d4ab73..96bc0488fc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ForeignConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ForeignConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example deletes the Foreign connector named Fax Connector. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or connector name of a specific Foreign connector. You can also include the server name by using the format ServerName\\ConnectorName. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalAddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalAddressList.md index aa81c3aac7..fa78078f11 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalAddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalAddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the GAL named OldGAL. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the global address list that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the GAL. For example: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md index a2657bb1a4..c940398a59 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes a global monitoring override of the ExtensionAttributes pro ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the monitoring item that was overridden. The value is in the form of HealthSet\\MonitoringItem or HealthSet\\MonitoringItem\\TargetResource. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ItemType parameter specifies the item type that you want to remove. It can be any of the following values: @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PropertyName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PropertyName parameter specifies the property for the override you want to remove. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BuildRange -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Roles -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-HybridConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-HybridConfiguration.md index 612fd6ffd0..7d69254dc4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-HybridConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-HybridConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example removes the HybridConfiguration object for the hybrid deployment. ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListEntry.md index 1eb3678517..2ef113d683 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the IP address range 192.168.0.0/24 from the IP Allow list. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the integer value of the IP Allow list entry that you want to remove. When you add an entry to the IP Allow list, the Identity value is automatically assigned. To find the Identity value of an IP Allow list entry, use the Get-IPAllowListEntry cmdlet. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListProvider.md index 59c3544dac..ee2fc3e4c7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the IP Allow list provider named Contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Allow list provider that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Allow list provider. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListEntry.md index 6fc2815694..ced2083df8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the IP address range 192.168.0.0/24 from the IP Block list. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the integer value of the IP Block list entry that you want to remove. When you add an entry to the IP Block list, the Identity value is automatically assigned. To find the Identity value of an IP Block list entry, use the Get-IPBlockListEntry cmdlet. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListProvider.md index d9de5066d9..b8322e65f5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the IP Block list provider named Contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Block list provider that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Block list provider. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-InboxRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-InboxRule.md index c4f3397c11..7045da5bf1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-InboxRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-InboxRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example removes all Inbox rules from the mailbox Joe@Contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Inbox rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob switch hides a warning message when you use Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App) or Exchange PowerShell to modify Inbox rules. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the Inbox rule. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IntraOrganizationConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IntraOrganizationConnector.md index 426008cadc..c46d33b773 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IntraOrganizationConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IntraOrganizationConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the existing Intra-Organization connector named "Contoso On ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Intra-Organization connector that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the connector. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-JournalRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-JournalRule.md index 58e379d9f0..c5c9c43c0b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-JournalRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-JournalRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the journal rule Brokerage Communications that's no longer ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the rule you want to remove. Enter either name or the GUID of the journal rule. You can omit the parameter label. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Mailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Mailbox.md index 0765f501d9..a5ec1e6026 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Mailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Mailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example removes the specified soft-deleted mailbox. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter identifies the mailbox that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StoreMailboxIdentity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuxAuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreLegalHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Migration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Migration switch is required to remove migration mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Permanent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolder switch is required to remove public folder mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveArbitrationMailboxWithOABsAllowed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveLastArbitrationMailboxAllowed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SupervisoryReviewPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabase.md index 25db72c47c..7170bc25ba 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the mailbox database MailboxDatabase01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox database that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md index 04f4669b42..50ce155e83 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes a copy of mailbox database DB1 from the Mailbox server MBX3 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the mailbox database whose copy is being removed. When using this parameter, specify a format of DatabaseName\\ServerName. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch.